mac80211.h 256.4 KB
Newer Older
1
/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2
/*
3 4
 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
 *
5 6
 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
 * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7
 * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8
 * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9
 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10
 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11 12 13 14 15
 */

#ifndef MAC80211_H
#define MAC80211_H

16
#include <linux/bug.h>
17 18 19 20 21
#include <linux/kernel.h>
#include <linux/if_ether.h>
#include <linux/skbuff.h>
#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
#include <net/cfg80211.h>
22
#include <net/codel.h>
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
23
#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24
#include <asm/unaligned.h>
25

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
/**
 * DOC: Introduction
 *
 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
 * drivers.
 */

/**
 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
 *
 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39 40 41
 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42 43 44 45
 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
 * tasklet function.
 *
 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
46
 *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47 48
 */

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
/**
 * DOC: Warning
 *
 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
 */

/**
 * DOC: Frame format
 *
 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
 * hardware.
 *
 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
 *
 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
 *
 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71 72
 */

73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
/**
 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
 *
 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
 *
 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
 * suspend.
 *
 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
 *
 */

88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
/**
 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
 *
 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
 * between different stations/interfaces.
 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
 *
 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
 * driver operation.
 *
101 102 103
 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 105 106 107
 *
 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
 *
108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116
 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
 *
 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
 * ieee80211_return_txq().
117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
 *
 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
 * .release_buffered_frames().
 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
 */

128 129
struct device;

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
130 131 132 133
/**
 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
 *
 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134
 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
135 136
 */
enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137
	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138
	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
139 140
};

141 142
#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
/**
 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
 */
enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
};

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
157 158 159 160
/**
 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
 *
 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161
 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
162
 *
163
 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164 165
 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
 *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
166
 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167
 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168
 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169
 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
170 171
 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
172
 */
173
struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174
	u16 txop;
175 176
	u16 cw_min;
	u16 cw_max;
177
	u8 aifs;
178
	bool acm;
K
Kalle Valo 已提交
179
	bool uapsd;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
180 181
	bool mu_edca;
	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190
};

struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
};

191 192
/**
 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193
 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194
 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195
 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196 197
 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
 *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198
 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199 200
 */
enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201
	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202
	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203
	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204
	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205
	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213
};

/**
 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
 *
 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
 *
214
 * @def: the channel definition
215
 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216 217 218 219
 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
 *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
 *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220
 *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221
 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222 223 224 225
 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
 *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
 */
struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226
	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227
	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228

229 230
	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;

231 232
	bool radar_enabled;

233
	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 235
};

236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272
/**
 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
 *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
 *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
 *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
 *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
 *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
 *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
 *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
 *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
 *      for changes/removal.)
 */
enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
};

/**
 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
 *
 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
 * done.
 *
 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
 */
struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
};

273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282
/**
 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
 *
 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
 *
 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
 *	also implies a change in the AID.
 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283
 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
T
Tomas Winkler 已提交
284
 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287 288 289 290 291 292
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
 *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
 *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
 *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293
 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294
 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295
 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296 297
 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
 *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298
 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299
 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300
 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
E
Eliad Peller 已提交
301
 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302
 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303
 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304
 *	changed
305 306
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
 *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307 308 309
 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
 *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
 *	context had been assigned.
310
 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311
 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312 313
 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
 *	keep alive) changed.
314
 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315
 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316
 *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317
 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318
 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319
 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320
 *
321 322 323 324 325
 */
enum ieee80211_bss_change {
	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
326
	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
A
Alexander Simon 已提交
327
	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
328
	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
329
	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
330 331 332
	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
333
	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
334
	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
335
	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
336
	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
337
	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
338
	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
339
	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
E
Eliad Peller 已提交
340
	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
341
	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
342
	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
343
	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
344
	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
345
	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
346
	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
347
	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
348
	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
349
	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
350
	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
351
	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
352
	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
353 354

	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
355 356
};

357 358 359 360 361 362 363
/*
 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
 * filtering will be disabled.
 */
#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4

364
/**
365 366
 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
367
 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
368
 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
369 370 371
 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
 *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
 *	once each time the timeout triggers.
372
 */
373 374
enum ieee80211_event_type {
	RSSI_EVENT,
375
	MLME_EVENT,
376
	BAR_RX_EVENT,
377
	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385
};

/**
 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
 */
enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
386 387 388 389
	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
};

390
/**
391
 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
392 393 394 395 396 397
 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
 */
struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
};

398 399 400
/**
 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
401
 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
402 403
 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
404 405 406
 */
enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
	AUTH_EVENT,
407
	ASSOC_EVENT,
408 409
	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424
};

/**
 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
 */
enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
	MLME_SUCCESS,
	MLME_DENIED,
	MLME_TIMEOUT,
};

/**
425
 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435
 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
 */
struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
	u16 reason;
};

436 437 438 439
/**
 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
 * @tid: the tid
440
 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
441 442 443 444 445 446 447
 */
struct ieee80211_ba_event {
	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
	u16 tid;
	u16 ssn;
};

448 449
/**
 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
450
 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
451
 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
452
 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
453
 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
454
 * @u:union holding the fields above
455 456 457 458 459
 */
struct ieee80211_event {
	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
	union {
		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
460
		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
461
		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
462 463 464
	} u;
};

465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477
/**
 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
 *
 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
 *
 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 */
struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
};

478
/**
479
 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492
 *
 * @lci: LCI subelement content
 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
 * @lci_len: LCI data length
 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
 */
struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
	const u8 *lci;
	const u8 *civicloc;
	size_t lci_len;
	size_t civicloc_len;
};

493 494 495 496 497 498
/**
 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
 *
 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
 *
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506
 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
 *	ACK, BACK or both
 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507 508
 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509 510
 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
 *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511
 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
512
 * @assoc: association status
513 514
 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
 *	or not
515
 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
516 517
 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
518 519
 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
520
 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
521
 *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
522
 *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
523
 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
524 525 526 527
 *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
 *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
 *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
 *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
528
 *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
529 530
 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
 *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
531
 *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
532 533
 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
 *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
534 535 536
 *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
 *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
 *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
537
 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
538
 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
539 540 541
 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
 *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
 *	the current band.
542
 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
543
 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
544 545
 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
546 547
 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
 *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
548
 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
549
 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
550 551 552
 *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
 *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
 *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
553
 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
554 555 556
 *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
 *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
 *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
557 558 559 560
 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
 *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
 *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
561
 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
562 563 564 565
 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
 *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
 *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
 *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
566 567 568
 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
 *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
 *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
569
 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
570 571 572
 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
 *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
 *	your driver/device needs to do.
E
Eliad Peller 已提交
573 574
 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
 *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
575
 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
576 577
 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
578
 * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
579 580 581 582 583 584
 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
 *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
 *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
 *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
 *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
 *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
J
Janusz Dziedzic 已提交
585
 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
586 587 588
 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
 *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
 *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
589 590 591 592 593 594 595
 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
 *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
 *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
 *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
 *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
 *	station.
596 597 598
 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
 *	responder functionality.
 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
S
Sara Sharon 已提交
599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606
 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
 *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
 *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
607
 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
608
 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
609
 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
610 611
 */
struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
612
	const u8 *bssid;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
613 614 615 616 617 618 619
	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
	bool uora_exists;
	bool ack_enabled;
	u8 uora_ocw_range;
	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
	bool he_support;
620
	bool twt_requester;
621
	bool twt_responder;
622
	bool twt_protected;
623
	/* association related data */
624
	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
625
	bool ibss_creator;
626 627 628 629
	u16 aid;
	/* erp related data */
	bool use_cts_prot;
	bool use_short_preamble;
630
	bool use_short_slot;
631
	bool enable_beacon;
632
	u8 dtim_period;
633 634
	u16 beacon_int;
	u16 assoc_capability;
635 636
	u64 sync_tsf;
	u32 sync_device_ts;
637
	u8 sync_dtim_count;
638
	u32 basic_rates;
639
	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
640
	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
641
	u16 ht_operation_mode;
642 643
	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
644 645
	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
646
	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
647
	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
648
	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
649
	int arp_addr_cnt;
650
	bool qos;
651
	bool idle;
E
Eliad Peller 已提交
652
	bool ps;
653 654 655
	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
	size_t ssid_len;
	bool hidden_ssid;
656
	int txpower;
657
	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
J
Janusz Dziedzic 已提交
658
	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
659
	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
660 661
	u16 max_idle_period;
	bool protected_keep_alive;
662 663
	bool ftm_responder;
	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
S
Sara Sharon 已提交
664 665 666 667 668 669 670
	/* Multiple BSSID data */
	bool nontransmitted;
	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
	u8 bssid_index;
	u8 bssid_indicator;
	bool ema_ap;
	u8 profile_periodicity;
671 672 673 674
	struct {
		u32 params;
		u16 nss_set;
	} he_oper;
675
	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
676
	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
677 678
};

679
/**
680
 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
681
 *
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
682
 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
683
 *
684
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
 *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
 *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
 *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
 *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
 *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
 *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
 *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
 *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
 *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
 *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
696 697 698 699 700 701
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
 *	station
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
702
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
703
 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711
 *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
 *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
 *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
 *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
 *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
 *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
 *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
 *	hardware queue.
712 713 714
 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
 * 	is for the whole aggregation.
715 716
 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
 * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
717 718 719
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
 *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
 *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
720 721 722
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
 *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
 *	off-channel operation.
723 724 725
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
 *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
 *	it can be sent out.
726 727
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
 *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
728 729
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
 *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
730 731 732
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
 *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
 *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
733 734 735 736
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
 *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
 *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
 *	queue gets full.
737 738 739
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
 *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
 *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
740 741 742
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
 *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
 *	should kick the MLME state machine.
743 744 745
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
 *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
 *	status to user space)
746
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
747 748
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
 *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
749 750 751 752
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
 *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
 *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
 *	handled properly by the device.
753 754 755
 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
 *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
 *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
756 757 758
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
 *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
 *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
759 760 761
 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
 *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
 *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
762 763
 *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
 *	PS-Poll responses.
764 765 766
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
 *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
 *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
767 768 769
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
 *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
 *	monitor injection).
770 771 772 773 774
 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
 *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
 *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
 *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
 *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
775 776 777
 *
 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
 *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
778
 */
779
enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
780
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
793
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
794
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
795
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
796
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
797
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
798
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
799
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
800
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
801
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
802
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
803
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
804
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
805
	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
806
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
807
	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
808
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
809
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
810
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
811 812
};

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
813 814
#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23

815 816 817 818 819
/**
 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
 *
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
 *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
820 821
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
 *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
822
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
823
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
824
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
825
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
826 827
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
 *	(header conversion)
828 829
 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
 *	has already been assigned to this frame.
830 831 832 833 834
 *
 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
 */
enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
835
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
836
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
837
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
838
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
839
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
840
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP	= BIT(6),
841
	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
842 843
};

844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851 852
/*
 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
 */
#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
853
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
854
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
855
	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
856

857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868
/**
 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
 *	Rate Control algorithm.
 *
 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
 *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
869 870
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
 *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
871 872 873
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
 *	Greenfield mode.
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
874 875 876
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
 *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
877 878 879 880 881
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
 *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
 *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
 */
882 883 884 885 886
enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),

887
	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
888 889 890 891 892
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
893 894 895
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
896 897 898 899 900
};


/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
901

902 903
/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
904

905
/* maximum number of rate stages */
906
#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
907

908 909 910
/* maximum number of rate table entries */
#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4

911
/**
912
 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
913
 *
914 915
 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
916
 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
917 918 919 920 921 922
 *
 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
 *
 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
923 924 925 926 927
 *
 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
928 929
 * information::
 *
930
 *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
931
 *
932 933 934 935
 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
936 937
 * information should then contain::
 *
938
 *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
939
 *
940 941
 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
942
 */
943 944
struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
	s8 idx;
945 946
	u16 count:5,
	    flags:11;
947
} __packed;
948

949 950 951 952 953 954
#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31

static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
{
	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
K
Karl Beldan 已提交
955 956
	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967
}

static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
{
	return rate->idx & 0xF;
}

static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
{
K
Karl Beldan 已提交
968
	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
969 970
}

971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979
/**
 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
 *
 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
 *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
 *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
 *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
 *
 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
980
 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
981
 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
982
 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
983
 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009
 * @control: union part for control data
 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
 * @pad: padding
 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
 * @status: union part for status data
 * @status.rates: attempted rates
 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
1010
 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1011
 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
D
Daniel Halperin 已提交
1012
 * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1013
 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
D
Daniel Halperin 已提交
1014
 * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1015
 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1016
 */
1017 1018 1019
struct ieee80211_tx_info {
	/* common information */
	u32 flags;
1020 1021 1022 1023 1024
	u32 band:3,
	    ack_frame_id:13,
	    hw_queue:4,
	    tx_time_est:10;
	/* 2 free bits */
1025 1026 1027

	union {
		struct {
1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033
			union {
				/* rate control */
				struct {
					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1034 1035
					u8 use_rts:1;
					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1036 1037
					u8 short_preamble:1;
					u8 skip_table:1;
1038
					/* 2 bytes free */
1039 1040 1041 1042
				};
				/* only needed before rate control */
				unsigned long jiffies;
			};
1043
			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1044
			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1045
			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1046
			u32 flags;
1047
			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1048
		} control;
1049 1050 1051
		struct {
			u64 cookie;
		} ack;
1052
		struct {
1053
			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1054
			s32 ack_signal;
1055
			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1056
			u8 ampdu_len;
1057
			u8 antenna;
1058
			u16 tx_time;
1059
			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1060
			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1061
		} status;
1062 1063 1064
		struct {
			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1065 1066
			u8 pad[4];

1067 1068 1069 1070 1071
			void *rate_driver_data[
				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
		};
		void *driver_data[
			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1072
	};
1073 1074
};

1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090
static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
{
	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
	 */
	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
}

static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
{
	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
}

1091
/**
1092
 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1093 1094 1095 1096
 *
 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
 * @info: Basic tx status information
 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1097
 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1098 1099 1100 1101 1102
 */
struct ieee80211_tx_status {
	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
	struct sk_buff *skb;
1103
	struct rate_info *rate;
1104 1105
};

1106 1107 1108
/**
 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
 *
D
David Spinadel 已提交
1109 1110 1111
 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118
 *
 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
 */
struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1119 1120
	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1121 1122 1123 1124 1125
	const u8 *common_ies;
	size_t common_ie_len;
};


1126 1127 1128 1129
static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
}
1130

1131 1132 1133 1134 1135
static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
}

1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
 *
 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
 *
 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
 *
 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
 *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
 *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
 */
static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
{
	int i;

	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
	/* clear the rate counts */
	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;

	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1165
	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1166 1167 1168 1169 1170
	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
}

1171 1172 1173 1174 1175 1176 1177 1178 1179 1180

/**
 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
 *
 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
 *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
 *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1181
 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1182 1183
 *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
 *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1184 1185 1186 1187
 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
 *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
 *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
 *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1188 1189
 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
 *	de-duplication by itself.
1190 1191 1192 1193
 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
 *	the frame.
 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
 *	the frame.
1194
 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1195 1196 1197
 *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
 *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
 *	merging.
1198 1199 1200
 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
 *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
 *	(including FCS) was received.
1201 1202
 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
 *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1203 1204
 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
 *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 1210 1211 1212 1213 1214
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
 *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
 *	each A-MPDU
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
 *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
 *	on this subframe
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
 *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1215 1216
 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
 *	done by the hardware
1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224
 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
 *	processing it in any regular way.
 *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
 *	them for sniffing purposes.
 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
 *	monitor interfaces.
 *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
 *	them for sniffing purposes.
1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233
 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
 *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
 *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
 *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
 *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
 *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
 *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
 *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
 *	interleaved with other frames.
1234 1235 1236
 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
 *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
 *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1237 1238 1239
 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
 *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
 *	the first subframe.
1240 1241
 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
 *	be done in the hardware.
1242 1243 1244
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
 *	frame
 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1245 1246
 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
 *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1247
 *	
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254
 *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
 *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
 *	 - DATA3_CODING
 *	 - DATA5_GI
 *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
 *	 - DATA6_NSTS
 *	 - DATA3_STBC
1255
 *	
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1256 1257 1258
 *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
 *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1259
 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1260 1261 1262 1263
 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
 *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
 *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
 *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1264 1265
 */
enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1266 1267
	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1268
	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1269 1270 1271 1272
	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1273
	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289
	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1290 1291
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1292 1293
	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1294
	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1295
	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1296 1297
};

1298
/**
1299
 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1300
 *
1301 1302 1303 1304 1305
 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
 *	if the driver fills this value it should add
 *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1306
 *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1307 1308 1309
 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1310
 */
1311 1312
enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1313 1314 1315 1316 1317
	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1318 1319
};

1320 1321 1322 1323 1324 1325
#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4

enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
	RX_ENC_HT,
	RX_ENC_VHT,
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1326
	RX_ENC_HE,
1327
};
1328

1329 1330 1331 1332 1333
/**
 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
 *
 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1334
 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1335
 *
1336 1337
 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
 * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1338 1339
 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
 *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1340 1341
 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
 *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1342
 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1343
 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1344 1345
 *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
 *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1346
 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1347 1348 1349
 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
 *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
 *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1350 1351 1352 1353
 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
 *	values were filled.
 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
 *	support dB or unspecified units)
1354
 * @antenna: antenna used
1355
 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1356
 *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1357
 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
1358
 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1359 1360
 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1361
 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1362 1363 1364
 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1365
 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1366 1367 1368
 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
 *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1369
 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1370
 */
1371 1372
struct ieee80211_rx_status {
	u64 mactime;
1373
	u64 boottime_ns;
1374
	u32 device_timestamp;
1375
	u32 ampdu_reference;
1376
	u32 flag;
1377
	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1378
	u8 enc_flags;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1379 1380
	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1381
	u8 rate_idx;
1382
	u8 nss;
1383 1384 1385 1386
	u8 rx_flags;
	u8 band;
	u8 antenna;
	s8 signal;
1387 1388
	u8 chains;
	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1389
	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1390
	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1391 1392
};

1393 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399
static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
{
	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
}

1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 1410 1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416 1417 1418 1419 1420 1421 1422 1423 1424 1425 1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431 1432
/**
 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
 *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
 *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
 *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
 *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
 *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
 *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
 *	@data field.
 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
 *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
 *	length
 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
 *
 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
 * data.
 */
struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
	u32 present;
	u8 align;
	u8 oui[3];
	u8 subns;
	u8 pad;
	u16 len;
	u8 data[];
} __packed;

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1433 1434 1435 1436 1437
/**
 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
 *
 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
 *
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1438 1439 1440
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
 *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
 *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
 *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
 *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
 *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
 *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
 *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
 *	for more.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1448 1449 1450 1451 1452
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
 *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
 *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
 *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
 *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1453 1454
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
 *	operating channel.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1455 1456
 */
enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1457
	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1458
	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1459
	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1460
	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1461
};
1462

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1463

1464 1465 1466 1467
/**
 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
 *
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1468
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1469
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1470
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1471
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1472
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1473
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1474
 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1475 1476
 *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
 *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1477 1478
 */
enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1479
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1480
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1481
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1482
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1483 1484 1485
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1486
	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1487 1488
};

1489 1490 1491
/**
 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
 *
1492 1493 1494 1495 1496
 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507
 */
enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,

	/* keep last */
	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
};

1508 1509 1510 1511 1512
/**
 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
 *
 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
 *
1513 1514
 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
 *
1515
 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1516 1517 1518
 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
 *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
 *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1519 1520 1521 1522
 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
 *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
 *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
 *
1523 1524
 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
 *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1525
 *
1526
 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1527
 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1528
 *
1529
 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1530 1531
 *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
 *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1532
 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1533 1534
 *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
 *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1535 1536 1537
 *
 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
 *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1538 1539 1540
 *	configured for an HT channel.
 *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
 *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1541 1542
 */
struct ieee80211_conf {
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1543
	u32 flags;
1544
	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1545

1546
	u16 listen_interval;
1547
	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1548

1549 1550
	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;

1551
	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1552
	bool radar_enabled;
1553
	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1554 1555
};

1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565
/**
 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
 *
 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
 * operation.
 *
 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
 *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
 *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
 *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1566 1567
 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
 *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1568 1569
 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
 *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1570
 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1571
 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1572 1573 1574
 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
  *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
  *	channel, expressed in TU.
1575 1576 1577
 */
struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
	u64 timestamp;
1578
	u32 device_timestamp;
1579
	bool block_tx;
1580
	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1581
	u8 count;
1582
	u32 delay;
1583 1584
};

1585 1586 1587 1588 1589
/**
 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
 *
 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
 *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1590 1591 1592 1593
 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
 *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
 *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
 *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1594 1595 1596 1597
 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
 *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
 *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
 *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1598 1599 1600
 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
 *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
 *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1601 1602 1603
 */
enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1604
	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1605
	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1606
	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1607 1608
};

1609 1610 1611 1612 1613 1614
/**
 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
 *
 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
 *
1615
 * @type: type of this virtual interface
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1616 1617
 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
 *	or the BSS we're associated to
1618
 * @addr: address of this interface
1619 1620
 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
 *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1621 1622 1623
 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
 *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
 *	for read access.
1624
 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1625 1626 1627 1628
 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
 *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
 *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
 *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1629 1630
 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1631 1632 1633 1634 1635
 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
 *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
 *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
 *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
 *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1636
 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1637
 *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1638
 *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1639 1640
 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
 *	interface.
1641 1642
 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
 *	for this interface.
1643
 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
1644
 *	sizeof(void \*).
1645
 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1646 1647
 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
 *	protected by fq->lock.
1648 1649
 */
struct ieee80211_vif {
1650
	enum nl80211_iftype type;
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1651
	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
M
Michael Braun 已提交
1652
	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1653
	bool p2p;
1654
	bool csa_active;
1655
	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1656 1657 1658 1659

	u8 cab_queue;
	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];

1660 1661
	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;

1662 1663
	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;

1664
	u32 driver_flags;
1665

1666 1667 1668 1669
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
#endif

1670
	bool probe_req_reg;
1671
	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1672

1673 1674
	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];

1675
	/* must be last */
1676
	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1677 1678
};

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1679 1680 1681
static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1682
	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1683 1684 1685 1686
#endif
	return false;
}

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697 1698 1699
/**
 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
 *
 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
 *
 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
 */
struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);

1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712
/**
 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
 *
 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
 *
 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
 */
struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

1713 1714 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 1720
/**
 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
 *
 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
 *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1721 1722
 *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
 *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1723 1724 1725
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
 *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
 *	generation in software.
1726 1727
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
 *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1728
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1729 1730
 *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
 *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1731
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1732
 *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1733
 *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1734 1735 1736
 *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
 *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
 *	MIC.
1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
 *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
 *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
 *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
 *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
 *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
 *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1744
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1745
 *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1746
 *	only for management frames (MFP).
1747 1748 1749
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
 *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
 *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1750 1751 1752
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
 *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
 *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1753
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1754 1755 1756
 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
 *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
 *	generation only
1757
 */
1758
enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1759 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 1765
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1766
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1767
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1768
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1769
	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1770
};
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1771

1772 1773 1774 1775 1776 1777 1778 1779
/**
 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
 *
 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
 *
 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
 *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1780
 *	encrypted in hardware.
1781
 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1782 1783
 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
 *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1784 1785 1786
 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
 * @keylen: key material length
1787 1788 1789 1790 1791
 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
 * 	data block:
 * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
 * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
 * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1792 1793
 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1794
 */
1795
struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1796
	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1797
	u32 cipher;
1798 1799
	u8 icv_len;
	u8 iv_len;
1800
	u8 hw_key_idx;
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1801
	s8 keyidx;
1802
	u16 flags;
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1803
	u8 keylen;
1804
	u8 key[];
1805 1806
};

1807 1808
#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16

1809 1810 1811
#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))

1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823
/**
 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
 *
 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
 *	reverse order than in packet)
 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
 *	reverse order than in packet)
 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
 *	reverse order than in packet)
 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
 *	reverse order than in packet)
1824
 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843
 */
struct ieee80211_key_seq {
	union {
		struct {
			u32 iv32;
			u16 iv16;
		} tkip;
		struct {
			u8 pn[6];
		} ccmp;
		struct {
			u8 pn[6];
		} aes_cmac;
		struct {
			u8 pn[6];
		} aes_gmac;
		struct {
			u8 pn[6];
		} gcmp;
1844 1845 1846 1847
		struct {
			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
			u8 seq_len;
		} hw;
1848 1849 1850
	};
};

1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880
/**
 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
 *
 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
 * the secure packet crypto handling.
 *
 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
 *     key_idx value calculation:
 *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
 */
struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
	u32 cipher;
	u16 iftype;
	u8 hdr_len;
	u8 pn_len;
	u8 pn_off;
	u8 key_idx_off;
	u8 key_idx_mask;
	u8 key_idx_shift;
	u8 mic_len;
};

1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889
/**
 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
 *
 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
 *
 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
 */
1890
enum set_key_cmd {
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1891
	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1892
};
1893

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912
/**
 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
 *
 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
 *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
 */
enum ieee80211_sta_state {
	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
};

1913 1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930
/**
 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
 *	(including 80+80 MHz)
 *
 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
 *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
 */
enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
};

1931 1932 1933 1934
/**
 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
 *
 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1935
 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1936 1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946 1947 1948
 *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
 */
struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
	struct {
		s8 idx;
		u8 count;
		u8 count_cts;
		u8 count_rts;
		u16 flags;
	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
};

1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966
/**
 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
 *
 * Used to configure txpower for station.
 *
 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
 *	to the STA.
 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
 *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
 *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
 *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
 *	per peer TPC.
 */
struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
	s16 power;
	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
};

1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974
/**
 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
 *
 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1975
 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1976 1977 1978
 *
 * @addr: MAC address
 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
1979
 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1980 1981
 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
1982
 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1983
 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
1984 1985 1986
 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
 *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
 *	Can be modified by driver.
1987 1988
 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
 *	otherwise always false)
1989
 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
1990
 *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1991
 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1992 1993
 *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
 *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1994
 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1995
 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1996 1997 1998 1999
 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
 *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
 *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
 *	the station moves to associated state.
2000
 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2001
 * @rates: rate control selection table
2002
 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2003 2004
 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
 *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2005
 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2006 2007 2008
 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
 *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
 *	unlimited.
2009
 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
2010
 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2011
 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2012
 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2013 2014
 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
 *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2015 2016
 */
struct ieee80211_sta {
2017
	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2018 2019
	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
	u16 aid;
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
2020
	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
M
Mahesh Palivela 已提交
2021
	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
2022
	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2023
	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
2024
	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2025
	bool wme;
2026 2027
	u8 uapsd_queues;
	u8 max_sp;
2028
	u8 rx_nss;
2029
	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2030
	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2031
	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2032
	bool tdls;
2033
	bool tdls_initiator;
2034
	bool mfp;
2035
	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044

	/**
	 * @max_amsdu_len:
	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
	 *
	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2045
	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051
	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
	 *
	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
	 */
2052
	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2053
	bool support_p2p_ps;
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
2054
	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2055
	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2056
	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2057

2058
	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2059

2060
	/* must be last */
2061
	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2062 2063
};

2064 2065 2066 2067
/**
 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
 *
 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2068
 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2069
 *
2070 2071 2072
 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
 */
2073
enum sta_notify_cmd {
2074 2075 2076
	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
};

2077 2078 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086
/**
 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
 *
 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
 * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
 */
struct ieee80211_tx_control {
	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
};

2087 2088 2089 2090 2091
/**
 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2092 2093
 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
 *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2094
 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2095
 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106
 *
 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
 */
struct ieee80211_txq {
	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
	u8 tid;
	u8 ac;

	/* must be last */
2107
	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2108 2109
};

2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118
/**
 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
 *
 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
 *
2119 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131
 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
 *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
 *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
 *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
 *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
 *	algorithm.
 *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
 *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
 *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
 *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
 *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
 *	CCK frames.
 *
2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141
 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
 *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
 *	the FCS at the end.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
 *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
 *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
 *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
 *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
 *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2142
 *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2143
 *
2144 2145 2146 2147 2148 2149 2150 2151 2152 2153
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
 *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
 *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
 *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
 *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
 *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
 *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
 *
2154 2155 2156
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
 * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
 * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
S
Sujith 已提交
2157 2158 2159
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
 *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2160
 *
2161 2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167 2168 2169
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
 *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
 *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
 *	stack support for dynamic PS.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
 *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2170 2171 2172
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
 *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2173
 *
2174 2175 2176 2177
 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
 *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
 *	the stack.
 *
2178
 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2179 2180
 *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
 *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2181
 *
2182 2183 2184
 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
 *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
 *	dtim_period).
2185 2186 2187 2188 2189 2190 2191
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
 *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
 *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
 *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
 *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
 *	only in that case.
2192 2193 2194 2195 2196 2197 2198
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
 *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
 *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
 *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
 *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
 *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2199 2200 2201 2202
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
 *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
 *	software.
2203
 *
2204 2205 2206
 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
 *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
 *	active interfaces.
2207
 *
2208 2209 2210 2211
 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
 *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
 *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
 *
2212 2213 2214 2215 2216 2217
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
 *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
 *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
 *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
 *	supported cipher suites.
 *
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
2218 2219 2220 2221
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
 *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
 *	for frames.
 *
2222 2223 2224 2225
 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
 *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
 *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
 *	control for more details.
2226
 *
2227 2228 2229
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
 *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
 *
2230 2231 2232
 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
 *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
 *	is supported.
2233 2234 2235
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
 *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2236
 *
2237 2238 2239 2240
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
 *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
 *	using aggregation for such frames.)
 *
2241 2242 2243 2244
 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
 *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
 *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
 *	CSA frame.
2245
 *
2246 2247 2248
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
 *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
 *
2249
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2250
 *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2251
 *
2252 2253 2254
 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
 *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
 *
2255 2256 2257
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
 *	within A-MPDU.
 *
2258 2259 2260
 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
 *	for sent beacons.
 *
2261 2262 2263 2264 2265
 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
 *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
 *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
 *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
 *
2266 2267 2268 2269 2270
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
 *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
 *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
 *	timeout.
 *
2271 2272 2273
 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
 *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
 *
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282
 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
 *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
 *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
 *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
 *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
 *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
 *
2283 2284 2285 2286 2287
 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
 *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
 *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
 *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
 *
2288 2289 2290 2291
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
 *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
 *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
 *
2292 2293 2294
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
 *	TDLS links.
 *
2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301
 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
 *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
 *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
 *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
 *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
 *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
 *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2302
 *
2303 2304
 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
 *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2305
 *
2306 2307 2308
 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
 *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
 *
2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
 *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
 *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
 *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
 *	See also the documentation for that flag.
 *
2315 2316 2317 2318
 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
 *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
 *	TXQs to start with.
 *
2319 2320 2321
 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
 *	length in tx status information
 *
2322 2323 2324 2325 2326
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
 *
 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
 *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
 *
2327 2328 2329 2330
 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
 *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
 *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
 *
2331
 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2332 2333
 */
enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2334 2335 2336 2337 2338 2339 2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352 2353 2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362
	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2363
	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2364
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2365
	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2366
	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2367
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2368
	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
2369 2370
	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2371
	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2372
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2373
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2374
	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2375
	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2376
	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2377
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2378
	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2379
	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2380 2381
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2382
	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2383 2384 2385

	/* keep last, obviously */
	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2386 2387
};

2388 2389
/**
 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2390 2391 2392 2393 2394 2395 2396
 *
 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
 *
 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
 *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
 *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2397 2398
 *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
 *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 2408 2409
 *
 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
 *
 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
 *	along with this structure.
 *
 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
 *
 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
 *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
 *
2410 2411
 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
 *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2412
 *
2413
 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2414
 *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2415
 *
2416
 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2417
 *	that HW supports
2418
 *
2419
 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
2420 2421 2422
 *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
 *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
 *
2423 2424 2425
 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
 *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
 *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2426 2427 2428
 *
 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
 *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2429 2430
 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
 *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2431 2432
 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
 *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2433 2434
 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
 *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2435
 *
2436 2437 2438 2439
 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
 *	can handle.
 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
 *	the hw can report back.
2440
 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2441
 *
2442 2443 2444 2445 2446 2447
 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
 *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
 *	aggregation.
 *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
 *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
 *	it shouldn't be set.
2448 2449
 *
 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
2450 2451 2452 2453 2454
 *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
 *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
 *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
 *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
 *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2455
 *
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
2456 2457 2458
 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
 *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
 *
2459 2460
 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
 *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2461 2462 2463
 *
 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
 *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
2464
 *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2465
 *	adding _BW is supported today.
2466
 *
2467 2468
 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
 *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
2469
 *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2470
 *
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
2471 2472
 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
 *
2473
 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2474
 *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2475
 *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481
 *	device_timestamp.
 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
 *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
 *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
 *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2482
 *
2483
 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2484 2485
 *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
 *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494 2495 2496
 *
 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
 *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
 *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
 *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
 *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
 *	neither enabled.
 *
 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
 *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
 *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2497 2498 2499 2500
 *
 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
 *	supported by HW.
2501 2502
 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
 *	device.
2503 2504 2505 2506
 *
 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
 *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
 *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2507
 *
2508
 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2509
 *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2510 2511
 *
 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2512
 */
2513 2514
struct ieee80211_hw {
	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2515
	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2516
	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2517
	void *priv;
2518
	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2519
	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2520
	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2521
	int vif_data_size;
2522
	int sta_data_size;
2523
	int chanctx_data_size;
2524
	int txq_data_size;
2525 2526
	u16 queues;
	u16 max_listen_interval;
2527
	s8 max_signal;
2528
	u8 max_rates;
2529
	u8 max_report_rates;
2530
	u8 max_rate_tries;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
2531 2532
	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
F
Felix Fietkau 已提交
2533
	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2534
	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2535
	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2536
	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2537 2538 2539 2540
	struct {
		int units_pos;
		s16 accuracy;
	} radiotap_timestamp;
2541
	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2542 2543
	u8 uapsd_queues;
	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2544 2545
	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2546
	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2547
	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2548
	u8 weight_multiplier;
2549
	u32 max_mtu;
2550 2551
};

2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565
static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
{
	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
}
#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)

static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
{
	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
}
#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)

2566 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 2575 2576 2577 2578
/**
 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
 *
 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
 * @req: cfg80211 request.
 */
struct ieee80211_scan_request {
	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;

	/* Keep last */
	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
};

2579 2580 2581 2582 2583 2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589 2590 2591 2592 2593 2594 2595 2596 2597 2598 2599 2600 2601 2602 2603
/**
 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
 *
 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
 * @status: channel-switch response status
 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
 */
struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
	u8 action_code;
	u32 status;
	u32 timestamp;
	u16 switch_time;
	u16 switch_timeout;
	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
};

2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609 2610 2611 2612 2613
/**
 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
 *
 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
 *
 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2614 2615
 *
 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2616 2617 2618
 */
struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);

2619 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624
/**
 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
 *
 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
 */
2625 2626 2627 2628 2629
static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
{
	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
}

2630
/**
2631
 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2632 2633 2634 2635
 *
 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
 * @addr: the address to set
 */
2636
static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2637 2638 2639 2640
{
	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
}

2641 2642
static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2643
		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2644
{
2645
	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2646
		return NULL;
2647
	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2648 2649 2650 2651
}

static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2652
			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2653
{
2654
	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2655
		return NULL;
2656
	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2657 2658 2659 2660
}

static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2661
			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2662
{
2663
	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2664
		return NULL;
2665
	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2666 2667
}

2668 2669 2670 2671 2672
/**
 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
 * @hw: the hardware
 * @skb: the skb
 *
J
Joe Perches 已提交
2673
 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2674 2675 2676 2677
 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
 */
void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);

2678 2679 2680 2681 2682 2683 2684 2685
/**
 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
 *
 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
 *
 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2686 2687 2688
 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2689 2690
 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2691
 *
2692 2693 2694 2695 2696 2697 2698 2699 2700
 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
 *
 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
 *
2701 2702 2703 2704 2705
 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
 *
2706 2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716
 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
 *
 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
 * based on the receive flags.
 *
 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
 * keys.
2717 2718 2719 2720 2721
 *
 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
 * handler.
 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
L
Lucas De Marchi 已提交
2722
 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2723 2724
 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2725
 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2726
 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2727 2728 2729 2730
 *
 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2731 2732
 *
 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2733
 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743
 * requirements:
 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
      mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
      completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
   2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
      at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
   3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
      encrypted with the new key and
   4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
   Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2744
 */
2745

2746 2747 2748 2749 2750
/**
 * DOC: Powersave support
 *
 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
 *
2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757 2758 2759 2760 2761 2762
 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
 * it finds traffic directed to it.
 *
 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
B
Bob Copeland 已提交
2763 2764
 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2765 2766 2767 2768
 *
 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2769 2770 2771 2772 2773
 *
 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2774 2775
 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2776 2777 2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784
 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
 *
 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
 * periods.
 *
B
Bob Copeland 已提交
2785
 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2786 2787 2788 2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796
 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
 *
 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2797
 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2798
 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2799 2800 2801 2802 2803 2804
 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
 *
 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2805 2806
 */

2807 2808 2809 2810
/**
 * DOC: Beacon filter support
 *
 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2811
 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2812 2813 2814 2815 2816 2817
 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
 *
2818 2819
 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827 2828 2829 2830 2831 2832
 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
 *
 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
 *
 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
J
Jani Nikula 已提交
2833
 *
2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852 2853 2854 2855 2856 2857 2858 2859 2860 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865
 *  - a list of information element IDs
 *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
 *
 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
 * vendor information elements.
 *
 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
 *
 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
 *
 *
 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
 *
 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
 * signal strength threshold checking.
2866 2867
 */

2868 2869 2870 2871 2872 2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892
/**
 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
 *
 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
 *
 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
 * hardware flags.
 *
 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
 * turned off otherwise.
 *
 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
 */

2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 2904 2905
/**
 * DOC: Frame filtering
 *
 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
 *
 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
 *
2906 2907 2908 2909 2910 2911 2912
 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918
 *
 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
 * or dropped.
 *
2919 2920 2921 2922 2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930
 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
 * the flag, but not clear it.
 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2931
 */
2932

2933 2934 2935 2936 2937 2938 2939 2940 2941 2942 2943 2944 2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952 2953 2954 2955 2956 2957 2958 2959 2960 2961 2962 2963 2964 2965 2966 2967 2968 2969 2970 2971
/**
 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
 *
 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
 *
 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
 * the driver code.
 *
 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
 *
 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
 * @sta_notify callback.
 *
 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2972
 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979
 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
 *
2980 2981 2982
 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
 *
2983 2984 2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990 2991 2992 2993 2994 2995 2996 2997 2998 2999 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004
 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
 *
 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3005
 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3006 3007 3008 3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014
 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
 *
 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3015
 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021
 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
 *
 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3022
 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3023 3024 3025 3026 3027
 *
 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3028 3029
 */

3030 3031 3032 3033 3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039 3040 3041 3042 3043 3044 3045 3046 3047 3048 3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073 3074 3075 3076 3077 3078 3079 3080 3081 3082 3083 3084
/**
 * DOC: HW queue control
 *
 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
 * was problematic for a few reasons:
 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
 *
 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
 *
 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
 * the hardware queue.
 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
 *
 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
 *
 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
 * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
 * off-channel queue:         9
 *
 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
 *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
 *
 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
 *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
 *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
 *
 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
 *
 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
 */

3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095 3096 3097 3098 3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108
/**
 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
 *
 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
 *
 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
 *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
 *	multicast address.
 *
 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
 *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
 *
 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
 *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
 *
 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
 *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
 *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
 *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
 *	honour this flag if possible.
 *
3109 3110
 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
 *	station
3111 3112
 *
 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
I
Igor Perminov 已提交
3113
 *
3114
 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3115 3116
 *
 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3117 3118
 *
 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3119
 */
3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126
enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
I
Igor Perminov 已提交
3127
	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3128
	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3129
	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3130 3131
};

3132 3133 3134 3135 3136
/**
 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
 *
 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3137 3138 3139
 *
 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3140
 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3141 3142
 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
 *
3143 3144
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3145
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3146 3147 3148 3149
 *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
 *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
 *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
 *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3150
 *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3151
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
 *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
 *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
 *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
 *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
 *	session is gone and removes the station.
 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
 *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
 *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
 *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3163 3164 3165 3166
 */
enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3167
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3168 3169 3170
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3171
	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3172
};
3173

3174
#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3175
#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3176

3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3196 3197 3198
/**
 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
 *
 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
 * @tid: tid of the BA session
 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
 *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
 *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
 *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
 *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
 *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
 *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
 */
struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
	u16 tid;
	u16 ssn;
L
Luca Coelho 已提交
3199
	u16 buf_size;
3200 3201 3202 3203
	bool amsdu;
	u16 timeout;
};

3204 3205 3206
/**
 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3207 3208
 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
 *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3209 3210 3211
 */
enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3212
	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3213 3214
};

3215 3216 3217 3218
/**
 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
 *
 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3219 3220 3221
 *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
 *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
 *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3222
 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3223 3224 3225
 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
 *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
 *	the peer.
3226 3227
 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
 *	by the peer
3228 3229 3230 3231
 */
enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3232
	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3233
	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3234 3235
};

3236 3237 3238 3239 3240
/**
 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
 *
 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3241
 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3242 3243 3244 3245 3246
 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3247
 *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3248 3249 3250 3251 3252 3253
 */
enum ieee80211_roc_type {
	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
};

3254 3255 3256 3257 3258 3259 3260 3261 3262 3263 3264 3265 3266 3267 3268 3269
/**
 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
 *
 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
 * reconfiguration type was completed.
 *
 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
 *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
 *	of wowlan configuration)
 */
enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
};

3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277 3278 3279
/**
 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
 *
 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
 *
 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
 *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
 *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3280
 *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3281 3282
 *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
 *	Must be atomic.
3283 3284 3285 3286 3287 3288 3289 3290 3291
 *
 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
 *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
 *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
 *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
 *	or zero.
 *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
 *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
 *	is added.
3292
 *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3293 3294 3295 3296 3297
 *
 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
 *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
 *	it must turn off frame reception.)
 *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3298 3299
 *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
 *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3300
 *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3301
 *
3302 3303 3304 3305 3306
 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
 *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
 *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
 *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
 *	reconfigured at resume time.
3307 3308 3309 3310
 *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
 *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
 *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
 *	must return 1 from this function.
3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317
 *
 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
 *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
 *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
 *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
 *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
 *
3318 3319 3320 3321 3322
 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
 *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
 *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
 *	in suspend().
 *
3323
 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3324
 *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330
 *	and @stop must be implemented.
 *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
 *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
 *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
 *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
 *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3331
 *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3332
 *
3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338
 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
 *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
 *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
 *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
 *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
 *
3339 3340 3341 3342 3343 3344 3345
 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
 *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
 *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
 *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
 *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
 *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
 *	MAC address of the device going away.
3346
 *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3347 3348 3349
 *
 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
 *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3350
 *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3351
 *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3352
 *
3353 3354 3355 3356 3357
 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
 *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
 *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
 *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
 *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3358 3359
 *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
 *	can sleep.
3360
 *
3361 3362 3363 3364
 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
 *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
 *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
 *
3365 3366
 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
 *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3367
 *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3368
 *
3369 3370 3371 3372 3373 3374 3375
 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
 *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
 *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
 *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
 *	which flags are changed.
 *	This callback can sleep.
 *
3376
 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3377
 * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3378 3379
 *
 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3380 3381
 *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
 *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3382
 *	is enabled.
3383
 *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3384
 *	The callback can sleep.
3385
 *
3386 3387 3388
 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
 * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
 * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3389
 *	The callback must be atomic.
3390
 *
3391 3392 3393 3394 3395 3396
 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
 *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
 *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
 *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
 *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
 *
3397 3398 3399 3400
 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
 *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
 *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
 *
3401
 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3402
 *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3403 3404
 *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
 *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412
 *	that power save is disabled.
 *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
 *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
 *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
 *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
 *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
 *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
 *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3413 3414 3415 3416 3417
 *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
 *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
 *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
 *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
 *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3418
 *	The callback can sleep.
3419
 *
3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426 3427
 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
 *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
 *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
 *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
 *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
 *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
 *	The callback can sleep.
 *
3428 3429 3430 3431 3432 3433
 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
 *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
 *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
 *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
 *
 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3434
 *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3435
 *
3436 3437
 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
 *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3438 3439 3440
 *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
 *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
 *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3441
 *
3442 3443 3444 3445
 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
 *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
 *	this notification.
 *	The callback can sleep.
3446
 *
3447 3448
 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
 * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3449
 *	The callback can sleep.
3450
 *
3451 3452 3453
 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
 *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
 *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3454
 *	The callback must be atomic.
3455
 *
3456
 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3457 3458 3459
 *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
 *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
 *	should be set as well.
3460 3461
 *	The callback can sleep.
 *
3462
 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3463
 *	The callback can sleep.
3464
 *
3465 3466 3467 3468
 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
 *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
 *
 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3469 3470 3471 3472 3473
 *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
 *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
 *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
 *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
 *	This callback can sleep.
3474
 *
3475 3476
 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
 *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3477 3478
 *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
 *	callback can sleep.
3479
 *
3480
 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3481 3482 3483
 *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
 *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
 *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3484
 *
3485 3486 3487 3488
 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
 *	power for the station.
 *	This callback can sleep.
 *
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3489 3490 3491 3492
 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
 *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
 *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
 *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3493 3494 3495 3496 3497 3498 3499 3500 3501 3502 3503
 *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
 *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
 *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
 *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
 *	The callback can sleep.
 *
 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
 *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
 *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
 *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
 *	in @sta_state.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3504 3505
 *	The callback can sleep.
 *
3506 3507 3508 3509 3510 3511 3512
 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
 *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
 *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
 *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
 *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
 *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
 *	Must be atomic.
3513 3514 3515
 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
 *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
 *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3516
 *
3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523 3524
 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
 *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
 *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
 *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
 *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
 *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
 *	The callback can sleep.
 *
3525
 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3526
 *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3527
 *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3528
 *	The callback can sleep.
3529 3530
 *
 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3531
 *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3532
 *	required function.
3533
 *	The callback can sleep.
3534 3535
 *
 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3536
 *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3537
 *	required function.
3538
 *	The callback can sleep.
3539
 *
3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545
 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
 *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
 *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
 *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
 *	The callback can sleep.
 *
3546 3547 3548 3549
 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
 *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
 *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
 *	TSF synchronization.
3550
 *	The callback can sleep.
3551 3552 3553 3554
 *
 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
 *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
 *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3555
 *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3556
 *	The callback can sleep.
3557
 *
3558 3559
 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
 *
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3560 3561 3562
 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
 *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
 *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3563
 *	The callback can sleep.
3564
 *
3565 3566
 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
 *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3567 3568 3569
 *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
 *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
 *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3570
 *
3571 3572
 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
 *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
W
Wey-Yi Guy 已提交
3573
 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3574 3575
 *
 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3576 3577 3578 3579
 *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
 *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
 *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
 *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3580
 *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3581
 *	The callback can sleep.
3582 3583 3584 3585 3586
 *
 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
 *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
 *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
 *	completion of the channel switch.
3587
 *
3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593
 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
 *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
 *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
 *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
 *
 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3594 3595 3596 3597 3598 3599 3600
 *
 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
 *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
 *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
 *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
 *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
 *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3601 3602 3603 3604
 *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
 *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
 *	must be accepted in this case.
 *	This callback may sleep.
3605 3606
 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
 *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3607 3608 3609 3610
 *
 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
 *
 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3611 3612 3613
 *
 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
 *	queues before entering power save.
3614 3615 3616 3617
 *
 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
 *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
 *	The callback can sleep.
3618 3619
 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
 *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3620
 *	The callback must be atomic.
3621 3622 3623 3624 3625
 *
 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
 *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
 *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
 *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3626
 *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3627 3628 3629 3630 3631 3632
 *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
 *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
 *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
 *	more-data bit must always be set.
 *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
 *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638
 *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
 *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
 *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
 *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
 *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
 *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3639 3640 3641
 *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
 *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
 *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3642 3643
 *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
 *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3644
 *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3645
 *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3646
 *	This callback must be atomic.
3647 3648 3649
 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
 *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
 *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3650
 *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3651 3652 3653 3654
 *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
 *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
 *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
 *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3655
 *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3656
 *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3657 3658 3659
 *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
 *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
 *	This callback must be atomic.
3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667
 *
 * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
 *
 * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
 *
 * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
 *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
 *
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676
 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
 *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
 *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
 *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
 *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
 *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
 *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
 *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
 *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3677 3678 3679
 *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
 *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
 *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3680 3681
 *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
 *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3682 3683
 *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
 *      duration for which the operation is requested.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3684
 *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3685
 *
3686 3687 3688 3689 3690 3691 3692 3693 3694
 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
 *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
 *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
 *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
 *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
 *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
 *	2 * (DTIM period).
 *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
 *
3695
 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3696
 *	This callback may sleep.
3697
 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3698
 *	This callback may sleep.
3699 3700 3701
 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
 *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
 *	channel context with different settings
3702
 *	This callback may sleep.
3703 3704
 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
 *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3705
 *	This callback may sleep.
3706 3707
 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
 *	unbound from vif.
3708
 *	This callback may sleep.
3709 3710 3711 3712
 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
 *	another, as specified in the list of
 *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
 *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3713
 *	This callback may sleep.
3714
 *
3715 3716 3717 3718 3719 3720 3721
 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
 *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
 *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
 *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
 *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
 *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3722
 *
3723 3724 3725 3726 3727
 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
 *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
 *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
 *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
 *	This callback may sleep.
3728
 *
3729 3730 3731
 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
 *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
 *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3732 3733 3734 3735
 *
 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
 *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
 *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3736
 *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3737 3738
 *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
 *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3739
 *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3740
 *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3741 3742
 *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
 *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3743 3744
 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
 *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3745
 *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3746
 *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3747 3748 3749
 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
 *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
 *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3750 3751 3752
 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
 *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
 *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3753 3754 3755
 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
 *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
 *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3756 3757 3758 3759
 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
 *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
 *	channel context is bound before this is called.
 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3760 3761 3762 3763
 *
 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
 *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
 *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3764 3765 3766
 *
 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
 *	and hardware limits.
3767 3768 3769 3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776
 *
 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
 *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
 *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
 *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
 *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
 *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
 *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
 *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3777 3778 3779 3780 3781 3782 3783
 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
 *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
 *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
 *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
 *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
 *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
 *	the function call.
3784 3785
 *
 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3786 3787 3788 3789
 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
 *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
 *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
 *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3790 3791 3792
 *
 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3793 3794 3795 3796 3797 3798
 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
 *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
 *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
 *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
 *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
 *	changed parameters.
3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804
 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
 *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
 *	this call.
 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
 *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
 *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3805 3806 3807 3808
 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
 *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
 *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
 *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3809 3810
 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
 *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3811 3812 3813
 *
 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3814 3815 3816
 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
 *	This callback may sleep.
3817
 */
3818
struct ieee80211_ops {
3819 3820 3821
	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3822 3823
	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3824 3825 3826
#ifdef CONFIG_PM
	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3827
	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3828
#endif
3829
	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3830
			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3831 3832
	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833
				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3834
	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3835
				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3836
	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3837 3838 3839 3840
	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
				 u32 changed);
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3841

3842 3843 3844
	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

3845
	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846
				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3847 3848 3849
	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				 unsigned int changed_flags,
				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3850
				 u64 multicast);
3851 3852 3853 3854
	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				    unsigned int filter_flags,
				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3855 3856
	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
		       bool set);
3857
	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3858
		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3859
		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3860
	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3861 3862 3863 3864
				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3865 3866 3867
	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3868 3869
	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3870
	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3871
		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3872 3873
	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3874 3875 3876
	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
D
David Spinadel 已提交
3877
				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3878
	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3879
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3880 3881 3882 3883 3884
	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			      const u8 *mac_addr);
	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3885 3886
	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3887 3888 3889
	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3890
	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3891
	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3892 3893 3894 3895
	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
				struct dentry *dir);
#endif
3902
	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3903
			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3904 3905 3906
	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3907 3908 3909 3910
	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3911 3912 3913
	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3914 3915 3916 3917
	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
			      u32 changed);
3918 3919 3920
	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3921 3922 3923 3924
	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3925
	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3926
		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3927
		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3928 3929 3930
	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			u64 tsf);
3931 3932
	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			   s64 offset);
3933
	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3934
	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 3947 3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958 3959 3960

	/**
	 * @ampdu_action:
	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
	 *
	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
	 *
	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
	 *
	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
	 * - ``TX:        81``
	 *
	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
	 *
3961 3962 3963 3964
	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
	 * if the session can start immediately.
	 *
3965 3966
	 * The callback can sleep.
	 */
3967
	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968
			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3969
			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3970 3971
	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
		struct survey_info *survey);
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
3972
	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3973
	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3974
#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3975 3976
	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			    void *data, int len);
W
Wey-Yi Guy 已提交
3977 3978 3979
	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
			     void *data, int len);
3980
#endif
3981 3982
	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3983
	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3984
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3985
			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3986 3987
	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3988 3989

	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990
				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3991
				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3992 3993
				 int duration,
				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3994 3995
	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3996 3997 3998
	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3999
	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4000 4001
	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4002 4003 4004
	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4005

4006 4007 4008 4009 4010
	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
				      bool more_data);
4011 4012 4013 4014 4015
	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
					u16 tids, int num_frames,
					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
					bool more_data);
4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024

	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
4025 4026

	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4027 4028
				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				  u16 duration);
4029

4030 4031 4032
	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045
	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
			       u32 changed);
	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4046 4047 4048 4049
	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
				  int n_vifs,
				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4050

4051 4052
	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058

#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
#endif
4059 4060 4061
	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4062 4063 4064
	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4065

4066 4067
	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4068 4069
	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4070 4071 4072
	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4073

4074 4075
	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4076 4077
	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4078 4079
	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			   int *dbm);
4080 4081 4082 4083 4084

	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4085
				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4086 4087 4088
	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4089 4090 4091
	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4092

4093 4094
	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4095
	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4096 4097 4098 4099 4100 4101

	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4102 4103 4104
	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 4110
	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			    u8 instance_id);
4111 4112 4113
	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				       struct sk_buff *head,
				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4114 4115 4116
	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4117 4118 4119 4120
	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127
	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4128 4129
};

4130
/**
4131
 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140
 *
 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
 * @priv_data_len.
 *
 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4141 4142
 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
 *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4143 4144
 *
 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4145
 */
4146 4147 4148 4149 4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164
struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
					   const char *requested_name);

/**
 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
 *
 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
 * @priv_data_len.
 *
 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
 * @ops: callbacks for this device
 *
 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
 */
static inline
4165
struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4166 4167 4168 4169
					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
{
	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
}
4170

4171 4172 4173
/**
 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
 *
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
4174 4175 4176
 * You must call this function before any other functions in
 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4177 4178
 *
 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4179 4180
 *
 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4181
 */
4182 4183
int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 4190 4191 4192 4193 4194
/**
 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
 *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
 */
struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
	int throughput;
	int blink_time;
};

4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207
/**
 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
 *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
 */
enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
};

4208
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4209 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217
const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
const char *
__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				   unsigned int flags,
				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4218
#endif
4219 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227
/**
 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
 *
 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4228 4229
 *
 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4230
 */
4231
static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239
{
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
#else
	return NULL;
#endif
}

4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248
/**
 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
 *
 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4249 4250
 *
 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4251
 */
4252
static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 4260
{
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
#else
	return NULL;
#endif
}

I
Ivo van Doorn 已提交
4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269
/**
 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
 *
 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4270 4271
 *
 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
I
Ivo van Doorn 已提交
4272
 */
4273
static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281
{
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
#else
	return NULL;
#endif
}

I
Ivo van Doorn 已提交
4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290
/**
 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
 *
 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4291 4292
 *
 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
I
Ivo van Doorn 已提交
4293
 */
4294
static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
I
Ivo van Doorn 已提交
4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 4300 4301
{
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
#else
	return NULL;
#endif
}
4302

4303 4304 4305
/**
 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4306
 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4307 4308 4309
 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
 *
4310 4311 4312 4313
 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
 *
 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4314
 */
4315
static inline const char *
4316
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4317 4318 4319 4320
				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
{
#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4321
	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327
						  blink_table_len);
#else
	return NULL;
#endif
}

4328 4329 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335
/**
 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
 *
 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
 */
4336 4337
void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

4338 4339 4340 4341 4342
/**
 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
 *
 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
4343
 * before calling this function.
4344 4345 4346
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to free
 */
4347 4348
void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

4349 4350 4351 4352 4353 4354 4355 4356 4357 4358 4359 4360 4361 4362
/**
 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
 *
 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware to restart
 */
void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

J
Johannes Berg 已提交
4363
/**
4364
 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4365
 *
4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371 4372 4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380
 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
 *
 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
 *
 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4381
 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4382 4383
 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
 * @napi: the NAPI context
4384
 */
4385 4386
void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4387

4388 4389 4390 4391
/**
 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
 *
 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Z
Zhu Yi 已提交
4392 4393 4394 4395
 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4396
 *
4397
 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
K
Kalle Valo 已提交
4398 4399
 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4400 4401
 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4402
 *
K
Kalle Valo 已提交
4403
 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4404
 *
4405 4406 4407
 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
4408 4409
static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
{
4410
	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4411
}
4412 4413 4414 4415 4416

/**
 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
 *
 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4417 4418
 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
 *
K
Kalle Valo 已提交
4419
 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4420 4421
 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4422 4423 4424 4425
 *
 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
4426
void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4427

K
Kalle Valo 已提交
4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434
/**
 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
 *
 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
 * (internally disables bottom halves).
 *
 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4435 4436
 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
K
Kalle Valo 已提交
4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442 4443 4444 4445 4446 4447 4448
 *
 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				   struct sk_buff *skb)
{
	local_bh_disable();
	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
	local_bh_enable();
}

4449 4450 4451 4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462
/**
 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
 *
 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
 * entering/leaving PS mode.
 *
 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
 *
 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
 * each other.
 *
 * @sta: currently connected sta
 * @start: start or stop PS
4463 4464
 *
 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4465 4466 4467 4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477
 */
int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);

/**
 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
 *                                  (in process context)
 *
 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
 * applies.
 *
 * @sta: currently connected sta
 * @start: start or stop PS
4478 4479
 *
 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4480 4481 4482 4483 4484 4485 4486 4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492
 */
static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
						  bool start)
{
	int ret;

	local_bh_disable();
	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
	local_bh_enable();

	return ret;
}

4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515 4516
/**
 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
 * @sta: currently connected station
 *
 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
 * connected station was received.
 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
 * be serialized.
 */
void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);

/**
 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
 * @sta: currently connected station
 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
 *
 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
 * from a connected station was received.
 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
 * serialized.
4517 4518 4519 4520
 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
 * checks.
4521 4522 4523
 */
void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);

4524 4525 4526 4527
/*
 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
 */
4528
#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4529

4530
/**
4531
 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4532
 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4533 4534
 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4535 4536
 *
 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4537 4538 4539 4540 4541 4542 4543 4544 4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554 4555 4556 4557 4558 4559
 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
 *
 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
 * call! Beware of the locking!)
 *
 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
 *
 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
 * use this API.
 */
void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4560

4561 4562 4563 4564 4565 4566 4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576 4577 4578 4579
/**
 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
 *
 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
 * rate selection table for the station entry.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
 */
void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
			    struct sk_buff *skb,
			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
			    int max_rates);

4580 4581 4582 4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594 4595
/**
 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
 *
 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
 * slow stations to starve).
 *
 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
 */
void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
					   u32 thr);

4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603 4604 4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
 *
 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
 * @info: tx status information
 */
void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);

4611 4612 4613 4614 4615 4616 4617
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
 *
 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
 *
4618 4619
 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4620
 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4621 4622
 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4623
 *
4624 4625 4626
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
4627
void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4628
			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4629

4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637 4638 4639 4640 4641 4642 4643 4644 4645 4646
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
 *
 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
 *
 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @status: tx status information
 */
void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);

4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653 4654 4655 4656 4657 4658 4659 4660 4661 4662
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
 *
 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
 * specific skbs.
 *
 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
 *	(NULL for multicast packets)
 * @info: tx status information
 */
4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668 4669 4670 4671 4672 4673
static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
{
	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
		.sta = sta,
		.info = info,
	};

	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
}
4674

4675 4676 4677 4678 4679 4680 4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689 4690 4691 4692 4693 4694
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
 *
 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
 *
 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
 * for a single hardware.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					  struct sk_buff *skb)
{
	local_bh_disable();
	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
	local_bh_enable();
}

4695
/**
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
4696
 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4697 4698 4699 4700
 *
 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
 *
4701 4702
 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4703 4704 4705 4706
 *
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
4707
void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4708
				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4709

4710 4711 4712 4713 4714
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
 *
 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4715
 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4716 4717 4718 4719 4720 4721 4722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729
 * 802.11 frames.
 *
 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
 * calls in the same tx status family.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
 */
void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			       struct sk_buff *skb);

4730 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740
/**
 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
 *
 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
 * connected STA.
 *
 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
 */
void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);

4741 4742
#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2

4743 4744 4745 4746
/**
 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4747 4748 4749
 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
 *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
 *	should be ignored.
4750 4751 4752 4753
 */
struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
	u16 tim_offset;
	u16 tim_length;
4754 4755

	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4756 4757 4758 4759 4760 4761 4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769
};

/**
 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
 *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
 *
 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
 * obtain the beacon template.
 *
 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4770 4771
 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
 * applicable, the CSA count.
4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781
 *
 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
 *
 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
 */
struct sk_buff *
ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);

4782
/**
4783
 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4784
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4785
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792
 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
 *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
 *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
 *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
 *
 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4793
 * obtain the beacon frame.
4794 4795
 *
 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4796
 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4797 4798
 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4799 4800
 *
 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4801 4802
 *
 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4803 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);

/**
 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4811
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4812 4813
 *
 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4814 4815
 *
 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4816
 */
4817 4818 4819 4820 4821
static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
{
	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
}
4822

4823 4824 4825 4826 4827 4828 4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836
/**
 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
 * This function is called implicitly when
 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
 *
 * Return: new csa counter value
 */
u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

4837 4838 4839 4840 4841 4842 4843 4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849
/**
 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @counter: the new value for the counter
 *
 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
 *
 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
 */
void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);

4850 4851 4852 4853 4854
/**
 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4855
 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4856 4857 4858 4859 4860
 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
 */
void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

/**
4861
 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
 */
bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);


4869 4870 4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877
/**
 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
 *
 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4878 4879
 *
 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4880 4881 4882 4883
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894
/**
 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
 *
 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4895 4896
 *
 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

/**
 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4905 4906
 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
 *	if at all possible
4907 4908 4909 4910 4911
 *
 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
 * BSSID and address is used.
 *
4912 4913 4914
 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
 *
4915 4916
 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4917 4918
 *
 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4919 4920
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4921 4922
				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				       bool qos_ok);
4923

4924 4925 4926
/**
 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4927
 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4928 4929
 * @ssid: SSID buffer
 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4930
 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4931 4932 4933
 *
 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
 * hardware.
4934 4935
 *
 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4936 4937
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4938
				       const u8 *src_addr,
4939
				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4940
				       size_t tailroom);
4941

4942 4943 4944
/**
 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4945
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4946 4947
 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4948
 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955
 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
 *
 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
 */
4956
void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4957
		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4958
		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4959 4960 4961 4962 4963
		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);

/**
 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4964
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4965
 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4966
 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4967 4968 4969 4970
 *
 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4971 4972
 *
 * Return: The duration.
4973
 */
4974 4975
__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4976
			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4977 4978 4979 4980

/**
 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4981
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4982 4983
 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4984
 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4985 4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991
 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
 *
 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
 */
4992 4993
void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4994
			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4995
			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4996 4997 4998 4999 5000
			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);

/**
 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5001
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5002
 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5003
 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5004 5005 5006 5007
 *
 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5008 5009
 *
 * Return: The duration.
5010
 */
5011 5012
__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5013
				    size_t frame_len,
5014
				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5015 5016 5017 5018

/**
 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5019
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5020
 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5021
 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5022
 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5023 5024 5025
 *
 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5026 5027
 *
 * Return: The duration.
5028
 */
5029 5030
__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5031
					enum nl80211_band band,
5032
					size_t frame_len,
5033
					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5034 5035 5036 5037

/**
 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5038
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5039 5040 5041 5042 5043
 *
 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5044 5045 5046 5047
 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
 *
 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
 * frames are available.
5048 5049 5050 5051 5052 5053 5054 5055 5056
 *
 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
 * use common code for all beacons.
 */
struct sk_buff *
5057
ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5058

5059 5060 5061 5062 5063 5064 5065 5066 5067 5068 5069 5070
/**
 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
 *
 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
 *
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
 */
void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);

5071
/**
5072 5073 5074 5075 5076 5077 5078 5079 5080 5081
 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
 *
 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
 * from the given packet.
 *
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
 *	with this P1K
 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
 */
5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090
static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
{
	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);

	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
}
5091

5092 5093 5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105
/**
 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
 *
 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
 * and transmitter address.
 *
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
 */
void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);

5106 5107
/**
 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5108
 *
5109 5110
 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
 * in the packet.
5111 5112
 *
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5113 5114 5115
 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
 *	encrypted with this key
 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5116
 */
5117 5118
void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5119

5120 5121 5122 5123 5124 5125 5126 5127 5128 5129 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134
/**
 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
 *
 * @pos: start of crypto header
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
 * @pn: PN to add
 *
 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
 * the packet payload)
 *
 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
 * point to the crypto header)
 */
u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);

5135 5136 5137 5138
/**
 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
 *
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5139
 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 5145 5146 5147 5148 5149 5150 5151 5152 5153
 *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
 *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
 *
 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
 * by the device and not by mac80211.
 *
 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
 * can be done concurrently.
 */
void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);

5154 5155 5156 5157
/**
 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
 *
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5158
 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165 5166 5167 5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177 5178 5179 5180 5181 5182 5183 5184 5185 5186 5187 5188 5189 5190 5191 5192 5193 5194 5195 5196 5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217 5218 5219
 *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
 *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
 * @seq: new sequence data
 *
 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
 *
 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
 * can be done concurrently.
 */
void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);

/**
 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
 *
 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
 *
 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
 */
void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);

/**
 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
 * @keyconf: new key data
 *
 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
 *
 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
 *
 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
 * of the reconfiguration.
 *
 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
 * the key that's being replaced.
 */
struct ieee80211_key_conf *
ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);

5220 5221 5222 5223 5224 5225 5226 5227 5228 5229
/**
 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
 * @gfp: allocation flags
 */
void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);

5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243 5244 5245 5246 5247
/**
 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
 *
 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
 */
void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);

/**
 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
 *
 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
 */
void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);

5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253
/**
 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
 *
 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5254 5255
 *
 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5256 5257 5258 5259
 */

int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);

5260 5261 5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275
/**
 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 *
 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
 */
void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

/**
 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 *
 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
 */
void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

5276 5277 5278 5279 5280
/**
 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
 *
 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5281 5282
 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
 * any context, including hardirq context.
5283 5284
 *
 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5285
 * @info: information about the completed scan
5286
 */
5287 5288
void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5289

5290 5291 5292 5293 5294 5295 5296 5297 5298 5299 5300 5301 5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310 5311
/**
 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
 *
 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
 */
void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

/**
 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
 *
 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
 * while associating, for instance.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
 */
void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320
/**
 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
 *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
 *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
 *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
 *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
 *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5321
 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5322 5323 5324 5325
 */
enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5326
	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5327 5328
};

5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334 5335 5336 5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344 5345 5346
/**
 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
 *
 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
 */
void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
				  void *data);

5347
/**
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
5348
 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5349 5350 5351
 *
 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5352 5353 5354
 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
 * be used.
5355
 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5356 5357
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5358
 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5359
 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5360 5361
 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
 */
5362 5363 5364 5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370 5371
static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
				    void *data)
{
	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
				     iterator, data);
}
5372

5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379
/**
 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
 *
 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5380
 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5381 5382
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5383
 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5384 5385 5386 5387
 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
 */
void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5388
						u32 iter_flags,
5389 5390 5391 5392 5393
						void (*iterator)(void *data,
						    u8 *mac,
						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
						void *data);

5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412
/**
 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
 *
 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
 */
void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					      u32 iter_flags,
					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
						u8 *mac,
						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
					      void *data);

5413 5414 5415 5416 5417 5418 5419 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425 5426 5427 5428
/**
 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
 *
 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
 * function for them.
 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
 */
void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
				       void *data);
5429 5430 5431 5432 5433 5434 5435 5436 5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444 5445 5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453
/**
 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
 *
 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
 */
void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);

/**
 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
 *
 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
 * workqueue.
 *
 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
 */
void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
				  unsigned long delay);

5454 5455
/**
 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5456
 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5457
 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5458
 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
5459 5460
 *
 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5461 5462 5463 5464 5465
 *
 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
 * will be managed by the mac80211.
 */
5466 5467
int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
				  u16 timeout);
5468 5469 5470

/**
 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5471
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5472 5473 5474 5475
 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
 *
 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5476 5477
 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
 * from any context.
5478
 */
5479
void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5480 5481 5482 5483
				      u16 tid);

/**
 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5484
 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5485
 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
R
Randy Dunlap 已提交
5486
 *
5487
 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5488 5489 5490 5491 5492
 *
 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
 * will be managed by the mac80211.
 */
5493
int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5494 5495 5496

/**
 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5497
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5498 5499 5500 5501
 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
 *
 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5502 5503
 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
 * can be called from any context.
5504
 */
5505
void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5506 5507
				     u16 tid);

5508 5509 5510
/**
 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
 *
5511
 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5512 5513
 * @addr: station's address
 *
5514 5515 5516
 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
 *
 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5517 5518
 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
 */
5519
struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5520 5521
					 const u8 *addr);

5522
/**
5523
 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5524 5525
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5526 5527
 * @addr: remote station's address
 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5528
 *
5529 5530 5531
 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
 *
 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5532 5533
 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
 *
5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540
 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
 *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
 *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
 *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
 *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
 *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
 *      is not reliable.
5541
 *
5542
 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5543
 */
5544 5545 5546
struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					       const u8 *addr,
					       const u8 *localaddr);
5547

5548 5549 5550 5551 5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 5566 5567 5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 5575 5576 5577 5578 5579
/**
 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
 * @hw: the hardware
 * @pubsta: the station
 * @block: whether to block or unblock
 *
 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
 *
 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
 * manner.
 *
 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
 * woke up while blocked or not.
 */
void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);

5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585 5586 5587 5588
/**
 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
 * @pubsta: the station
 *
 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
 *
5589 5590 5591 5592 5593 5594 5595 5596 5597
 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
 *
 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
 *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
 *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
 *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5598
 */
5599
void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5600

5601 5602 5603 5604 5605 5606 5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618 5619 5620 5621 5622
/**
 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
 * @pubsta: the station
 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
 *
 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
 */
void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);

5623 5624 5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630 5631 5632 5633 5634 5635 5636 5637 5638 5639 5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647 5648 5649 5650
/**
 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
 *
 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
 *
 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
 * attempts.
 *
 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
 * them to 0.
 *
 * @pubsta: the station
 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
 */
void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);

5651 5652 5653 5654 5655 5656 5657 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662
/**
 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
 *
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
 *
 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
 */
bool
ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);

5663 5664 5665 5666 5667 5668 5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675
/**
 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
 *
 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5676 5677 5678 5679
 *
 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
 * set_key callback.
5680 5681 5682 5683 5684 5685 5686 5687 5688 5689
 */
void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
				      void *data),
			 void *iter_data);

5690 5691 5692 5693 5694 5695 5696 5697 5698 5699 5700 5701 5702 5703 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 5711 5712 5713
/**
 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
 *
 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
 * in removal process will be skipped.
 *
 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
 * and thus iter must be atomic.
 */
void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
					  void *data),
			     void *iter_data);

5714 5715
/**
 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5716
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5717 5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 5723 5724 5725 5726
 * @iter: iterator function
 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
 *
 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
 * places while calling into the driver.
 *
 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
 * removed.
5727 5728 5729 5730 5731
 *
 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
 * or not.
5732 5733 5734 5735 5736 5737 5738 5739
 */
void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
		     void *data),
	void *iter_data);

5740 5741 5742 5743 5744 5745 5746 5747 5748 5749
/**
 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
 * information. This function must only be called from within the
 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5750 5751 5752
 * %NULL.
 *
 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5753 5754 5755 5756
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

5757 5758 5759
/**
 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
 *
5760
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5761
 *
5762
 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5763
 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5764 5765 5766
 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
 */
void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5767

5768 5769 5770 5771 5772
/**
 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
5773
 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5774 5775
 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5776 5777
 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783
 *
 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
 * without connection recovery attempts.
 */
void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

5784 5785 5786 5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802 5803 5804 5805
/**
 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 *
 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
 *
 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
 * disconnect normally later.
 *
 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
 */
void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5806

5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812
/**
 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
 *	rssi threshold triggered
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5813
 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5814 5815
 * @gfp: context flags
 *
5816
 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5817 5818 5819 5820 5821
 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
 */
void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5822
			       s32 rssi_level,
5823 5824
			       gfp_t gfp);

5825 5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832
/**
 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @gfp: context flags
 */
void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);

5833 5834 5835 5836 5837 5838 5839
/**
 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 */
void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

5840 5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849
/**
 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
 *
 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
 * and wake up the suspended queues.
 */
void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);

5850 5851 5852
/**
 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
J
Johannes Berg 已提交
5853
 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5854 5855 5856 5857 5858 5859 5860 5861
 *
 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
 */
void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);

5862 5863 5864 5865 5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873
/**
 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 */
void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

/**
 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 */
void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);

5874 5875 5876 5877 5878 5879 5880 5881 5882 5883 5884 5885 5886 5887 5888 5889 5890
/**
 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
 *
 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
 */
void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
				  const u8 *addr);

5891 5892 5893 5894 5895 5896 5897 5898 5899 5900 5901 5902 5903 5904 5905 5906 5907 5908
/**
 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
 * @pubsta: station struct
 * @tid: the session's TID
 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
 *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
 *
 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
 */
void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
					  u16 received_mpdus);

5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916 5917 5918 5919 5920 5921
/**
 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
 *
 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
 * buffer.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @ra: the peer's destination address
 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
 */
void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);

5922 5923 5924 5925 5926 5927
/**
 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
 * @addr: station mac address
 * @tid: the rx tid
 */
5928
void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5929
				 unsigned int tid);
5930

5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938 5939 5940 5941 5942 5943 5944
/**
 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
 *
 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
 * reordering.
 *
 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
 * @addr: station mac address
 * @tid: the rx tid
 */
5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951
static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
{
	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
		return;
	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
}
5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958 5959 5960 5961 5962 5963 5964 5965 5966

/**
 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
 *
 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
 * reordering.
 *
 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
 * @addr: station mac address
 * @tid: the rx tid
 */
5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973
static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
{
	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
		return;
	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
}
5974

5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989
/**
 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
 *
 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
 *
 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
 * @addr: station mac address
 * @tid: the rx tid
 */
void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);

5990
/* Rate control API */
5991

5992
/**
5993 5994 5995 5996 5997
 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
 *
 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5998 5999
 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
 *	to be filled in
6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006
 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
 *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
 *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
 *	RTS threshold
 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
 *	if the selected rate supports it
6007
 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6008
 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6009
 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017
 */
struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
	struct sk_buff *skb;
	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
	bool rts, short_preamble;
6018
	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6019
	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6020
	bool bss;
6021 6022
};

6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033 6034 6035 6036
/**
 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
 */
enum rate_control_capabilities {
	/**
	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
	 */
	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
};

6037
struct rate_control_ops {
6038
	unsigned long capa;
6039
	const char *name;
6040 6041 6042
	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6043 6044 6045 6046
	void (*free)(void *priv);

	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6047
			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6048
			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6049
	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6050
			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6051 6052
			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
			    u32 changed);
6053 6054 6055
	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
			 void *priv_sta);

6056 6057 6058
	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6059 6060 6061
	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6062 6063
	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6064 6065 6066

	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
				struct dentry *dir);
6067 6068

	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6069 6070 6071
};

static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6072
				 enum nl80211_band band,
6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088
				 int index)
{
	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
}

static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
{
	int i;

	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
			return i;

	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6089
	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6090

6091
	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6092 6093 6094
	return 0;
}

6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105
static inline
bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
{
	unsigned int i;

	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
			return true;
	return false;
}
6106

6107 6108 6109 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122
/**
 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
 *
 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
 * the most recent rate control module decision.
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
 */
int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);

6123 6124
int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6125

6126 6127 6128
static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
{
6129
	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6130 6131 6132 6133 6134
}

static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
{
6135 6136
	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6137 6138 6139 6140 6141
}

static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
{
6142 6143
	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6144 6145 6146 6147 6148
}

static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
{
6149
	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6150 6151 6152 6153 6154
}

static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
{
6155 6156 6157
	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6158 6159
}

6160 6161 6162 6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169 6170 6171 6172 6173 6174 6175 6176 6177 6178 6179 6180 6181
static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
{
	if (p2p) {
		switch (type) {
		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
		default:
			break;
		}
	}
	return type;
}

static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
{
	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
}

6182 6183 6184 6185 6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196
/**
 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
 *
 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
 *
 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
 * matching GroupId management frame.
 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
 */
void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);

6197 6198 6199 6200 6201
void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				   int rssi_min_thold,
				   int rssi_max_thold);

void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6202

6203
/**
6204
 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6205 6206 6207
 *
 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
 *
6208 6209 6210 6211
 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
 *
 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
 * applicable.
6212
 */
6213 6214
int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);

6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226
/**
 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
 * @vif: virtual interface
 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
 * @gfp: allocation flags
 *
 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
 */
void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
				    gfp_t gfp);

6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 6237 6238 6239 6240
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @vif: virtual interface
 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
 * @band: the band to transmit on
 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
 *
 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
 */
bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);

6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248
/**
 * Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header of injected frames
 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
 */
bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
				 struct net_device *dev);

6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 6259 6260 6261 6262 6263 6264 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 6292 6293 6294 6295
/**
 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
 *
 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
 *
 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
 *
 * private:
 *
 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
 */
struct ieee80211_noa_data {
	u32 next_tsf;
	bool has_next_tsf;

	u8 absent;

	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
	struct {
		u32 start;
		u32 duration;
		u32 interval;
	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
};

/**
 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
 *
 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
 * @data: NoA tracking data
 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
 *
 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
 */
int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);

/**
 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
 *
 * @data: NoA tracking data
 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
 */
void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);

6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 6306 6307 6308
/**
 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
 * @vif: virtual interface
 * @peer: the peer's destination address
 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
 * @gfp: allocation flags
 *
 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
 */
void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6309

6310 6311 6312 6313 6314 6315 6316 6317 6318 6319 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328 6329 6330 6331 6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6346
/**
 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
 *
 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
 *
 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
 *
 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
 * @tid: the TID to reserve
 *
 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
 */
int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);

/**
 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
 *
 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
 *
 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
 *
 * @sta: the station
 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
 */
void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);

6347 6348 6349 6350
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6351 6352
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
 *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6353 6354
 *
 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6355 6356 6357
 *
 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6358
 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6359 6360 6361 6362
 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6363 6364 6365
 *
 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6366 6367 6368
 */
struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6369

6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379 6380 6381 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389 6390 6391 6392
/**
 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
 * (in process context)
 *
 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
 * (internally disables bottom halves).
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
 *	ieee80211_next_txq()
 */
static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
{
	struct sk_buff *skb;

	local_bh_disable();
	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
	local_bh_enable();

	return skb;
}

6393 6394 6395 6396 6397 6398 6399 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405
/**
 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
 *
 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
 * driver has finished scheduling it.
 */
struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);

/**
6406
 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6407 6408 6409 6410
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
 *
6411 6412
 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6413
 */
6414 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419
void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);

/* (deprecated) */
static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
{
}
6420

6421 6422 6423
void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);

6424
/**
6425
 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6426 6427
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6428
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6429
 *
6430 6431 6432 6433 6434
 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
 *
 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
 * this TXQ internally.
6435
 */
6436 6437 6438 6439 6440
static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
{
	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
}
6441

6442
/**
6443
 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6444 6445 6446
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6447 6448 6449 6450
 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
 *
 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
 * internally.
6451
 */
6452
static inline void
6453 6454
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
		     bool force)
6455
{
6456
	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6457
}
6458

6459 6460 6461 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473
/**
 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
 *
 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
 * next_txq().
 *
 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
 * again.
 *
 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6474
 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485
 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
 */
bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);

6486 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 6499
/**
 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
 *
 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
 *
 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
 */
void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6500 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 6511 6512 6513 6514 6515

/**
 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
 *
 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @inst_id: the local instance id
 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
 * @gfp: allocation flags
 */
void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
				   u8 inst_id,
				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
				   gfp_t gfp);
6516 6517 6518 6519 6520 6521 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531

/**
 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
 *
 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @match: match event information
 * @gfp: allocation flags
 */
void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
			      gfp_t gfp);

6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 6559
/**
 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
 *
 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
 *          information.
 * @len: frame length in bytes
 */
u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
			      int len);

/**
 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
 *
 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
 *
 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
 * @len: frame length in bytes
 */
u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
			      int len);
6560 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565 6566 6567 6568 6569 6570
/**
 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
 *
 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
 * hardware or firmware.
 *
 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
 */
bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6571

6572
#endif /* MAC80211_H */